Chrysler 11WK741-126-AB Automobile User Manual

2011 Grand Cherokee
2011
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
11WK741-126-AB
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Grand Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
291680.ps 11JK72-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 05/14/2010 06:18:00
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 8
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle, it can go places and
perform tasks for which conventional two-wheel drive
enclosed vehicles were not intended. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both
on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar
with your vehicle.
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience. When driving off-road or working
the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle
to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe
federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publicaBefore you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s tions carefully. Following the instructions and recomManual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis- enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
INTRODUCTION
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
5
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
1
6
INTRODUCTION
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts
provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact,
the U.S. government notes that the universal use of
existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION
7
8
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile
VIN Location
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of
your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
INTRODUCTION
9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Remote Open Window Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 26
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 28
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
䡵 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
䡵 Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 50
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 53
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 54
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 55
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 57
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
▫ Seatbelt Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 63
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . 66
13
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 72
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 92
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outsidethe Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And NOTE: With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the ElecOperating” for further information.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the
ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
15
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— LOCK
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on
the driver’s side should the battery in the vehicle or the
RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for
locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding.
Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)
into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the
shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key
to the right slightly, then remove the Key Fob as
described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
Emergency Key Removal
the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
and stopped, but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
you obtain service.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
17
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key
Fob in the ignition or Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
position.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posiWith the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, opening the drivtion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
er’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed in
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the rebulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
minder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
19
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• With Keyless Enter-N-Go, always remember to
place the ignition in OFF.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- • This device must accept any interference that may be
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
received, including interference that may cause undeblank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
sired operation.
is one that has never been programmed.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unauthorthe authorized dealer.
ized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks, power liftgate and flipper glass
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both
audio and visual signals, the horn will sound, the headperformed at an authorized dealer.
lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatGeneral Information
edly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is three minutes, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn
subject to the following conditions:
signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate, or
when you use the power door lock switch while the door
is open. After all the doors are locked and closed, the
Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument cluster)
21
will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 second
arming period, opening any door or the liftgate will
cancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm successfully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a
slower rate to indicate the alarm is set.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button until the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicates
that the vehicle ignition is “OFF” (refer to “Starting
Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information). Then either press the power door LOCK
switch while the driver or passenger door is open, press
the lock button on the front driver or passenger door
handle with a valid key fob in range, or press the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter LOCK button (refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information).
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to
press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. If
something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm. You may also accidentally sound the
Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with the key and then opening the door.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter,
pull on the front driver or passenger door handle (refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information) with a valid
key fob in range, or press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/
Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the
vehicle), or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch
(if the Start/Stop button is removed) and rotate it to the
ON/RUN position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights come on when you open any door or
use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock any door. They will remain on for approximately
30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all the doors. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
23
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Key Fob with Four-Button RKE Transmitter
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE
transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your InRefer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
strument Panel” for further information.
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Press
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable FeaCenter (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programtures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
mable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
further information.
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
25
Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
lower completely.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
Using The Panic Alarm
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
feature. The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off. To
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
headlights and park lamps will flash, the horn will pulse
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customeron and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps
and horn will remain on.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Emergency Key Removal
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
27
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
2
Separating RKE Transmitter
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• This device must accept any interference received,
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
including interference that may cause undesired
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveoperation.
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apapproximately
300 ft (91 m).
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
29
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shutdown in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
to the ON/RUN position.
in the Remote Start mode.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button • The engine can be started two consecutive times with
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five secthe RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
third cycle.
cycle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
NOTE:
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
position in order to drive the vehicle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Insert
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
Key and Turn To Run” will display in the EVIC until
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InforStart request.
mation Center (EVIC)” for further information.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go feaUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
ture, the message “Push Start Button” will display in
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
the EVIC until you push the START button.
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. If the lock knob is down when the door is closed,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel”.
Manual Door Lock Knob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave unattended children in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
2
Power Door Lock Switch
Power Door Locks
If
the
lock
knob
is
down when the door is closed, the door
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
will
lock.
Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
the vehicle before closing the door.
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the
doors will not lock.
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
If this feature is selected, your door locks will lock
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
(24 km/h) and all doors are closed. This feature will reset
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
whenever a door is opened.
Rear Doors
This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
To engage or disengage the Child-Protection Door
information.
Lock system
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If a passive entry door handle has not been used for
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
72 hours, the passive entry feature for the handle may
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
time out. Pulling the deactivated front door handle
down the window, and open the door using the outside
will reactivate the door handle’s passive entry feature.
door handle.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the passive entry door handle, the unlock
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reThe Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
sponse time.
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to • If you unlock the doors using the passive entry door
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
automatically lock after 60 seconds.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected outside
the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on
the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button on the right side of
the chrome accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
below the flipper glass to lock or unlock the vehicle.
Liftgate Passive Entry Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button
on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
programmed in EVIC, the liftgate and Flipper glass will
unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on
the outside of the handle.
2
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either passive entry door handle.
• The passive entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
Power Windows
The
power
window
switches remain active for up to
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
10
minutes
after
the
ignition
switch has been turned OFF.
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
Opening
a
vehicle
front
door
will cancel this feature.
passenger door and rear doors which operate the front
passenger and rear passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
41
The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condiTo open the window part way, press to the first detent
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to Window Lockout Button
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually. The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
WARNING!
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
press the Window Lockout button again.
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
43
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle and lift.
Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger
or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.
2
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Liftgate Flipper Glass
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.
Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing
activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass
is open.
NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should
occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
WARNING!
Liftgate Glass Release
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pulling
up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the
LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open
the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
45
To operate the power liftgate manually in the open
direction, pull the liftgate handle once to initiate a power
cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put
liftgate into manual mode.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by ⬙Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)/
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in ⬙Underoverhead console, or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE standing Your Instrument Panel⬙.
button located on left rear trim, near the liftgate opening.
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction to the
Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
once will close the liftgate only, this button cannot be
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
used to open the liftgate.
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
button to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, press
the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the
liftgate, and then press it again to close.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
NOTE:
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
manual operation.
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
meets sufficient resistance.
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
below ⫺22°F (⫺30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
rear liftgate close button or overhead console close
liftgate switches.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
47
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power Some of the most important safety features in your
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a vehicle are the restraint systems:
detection of an obstruction.
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on
top of the front seats (integrated into the head restraint)
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
wheel
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
collision.
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
Please pay close attention to the information in this
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
during an impact event
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include possible.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
WARNING!
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
item in a seat — if equipped
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold buckled up properly.
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
49
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in an accident much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
Latch Plate
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
51
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Latch Plate to Buckle
(Continued)
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
53
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. shoulder belt.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
anchor point.
allow it to retract fully.
Removing Slack from Belt
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
that fits you best.
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by
pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it
is locked into position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
55
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
accident.
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This additional information refer to “Installing Child Refeature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
the occupant’s chest.
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
First Row
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preSecond Row
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
Third Row
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combina• N/A — Not Applicable
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
restrained in the rear seat.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated you will hear a
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- the entire belt is extracted.
ably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Driver
N/A
ALR
N/A
Center
N/A
ALR
N/A
Passenger
ALR
ALR
N/A
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
57
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will Seat Belt Pretensioners
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
accident. These devices improve the performance of the
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
locking mode.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
WARNING!
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re- The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func- straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensiontion is not working properly when checked ac- ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
deployed airbag must be replaced immediately.
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec- However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severin two halves, with the front half being soft foam and ity and type of the impact.
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front
Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
59
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active a comfortable position.
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
61
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seatbelts. This feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seatbelts are
fastened. BeltAlert威 triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle
speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The reminder sequence lasts
for 96 seconds or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt ReAHR In Reset Position
minder Light remains illuminated until front belts are
NOTE:
fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the to fasten their seatbelts. If a front seatbelt is unbuckled
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
BeltAlert威 will chime as a single notification and illumi• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed to
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
the 96 second reminder sequence.
dealer.
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt
Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle and
then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three times
within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
dealer or by following these steps:
completed the programming.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the
on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while reON/RUN or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does
buckling the seat belt.
not recommend deactivating BeltAlert威.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON/RUN or START, buckle the driver’s NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
seatbelt.
while the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with
belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
63
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
Seatbelt Lock Out
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwill not allow you to extract the center webbing unless tender and store it.
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags
the force if there is an accident.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
Seat Belt Extender
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airwhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers. design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
airbags, are located above the side windows and their
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbags
2 — Knee Bolster
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
65
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted • Steering Wheel and Column
Side Airbags (SAB) to provide enhanced protection for an
• Instrument Panel
occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental SeatMounted Side Airbags are located in the outboard side of • Knee Impact Bolster
the front seats.
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
but they will open during airbag deployment.
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an •
authorized dealer immediately.
•
Airbag System Components
•
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
system components:
•
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Airbag Warning Light
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
Front Passenger
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the airbag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because
the airbags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Label
67
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag
deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys
the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only
the right airbag.
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Location
NOTE:
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC airbags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners, SAB
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both
front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy
the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags and SABIC
airbags during impacts that require side airbag occupant
protection.
69
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltrisk of harm from a deploying airbag:
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Children 12 years old and under should always ride
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
buckled up in a rear seat.
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags
will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
(Continued)
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) and Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Airbags (SAB) need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC airbags, SAB airbags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
required for this vehicle.
Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
73
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
initial deceleration.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
of collision.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
Light in the instrument panel for approxitime, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
deployed.
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acciturns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
away from an inflating airbag.
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruthe airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
airbag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the right side of the instrument panel. When the
ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front
Airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front
Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible,
based on the collision type and severity. The steering
wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the
instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the
airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in
about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time
it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of
collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
75
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side
airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The side
airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about onequarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners, SAB and/or
SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
In front and side impacts, front and side impact sensors
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response
removed.
to certain impact events.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If A Deployment Occurs
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
The Advanced Front Airbags are designed to deflate
the communication network remains intact, and the
immediately after deployment.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
ing functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
77
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium airbags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
2
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag
system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
airbag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with airbag system electrical components. While the
airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any
of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
79
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check
the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located
on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
2
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened;
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perlaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g. name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce- Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckment, could combine the EDR data with the type of led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
crash investigation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
81
There are different sizes and types of restraints for Infants And Child Restraints
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
child.
carriers and convertible child seats.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System.)
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The second row seating positions are equipped with
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR). To install child
restraint seats pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough allowance to pass it through the child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the shoulder belt until it is fully extended from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. For additional
information refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
Mode⬙ earlier in the Occupant Restraints Section of the
owners’ manual.
83
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/ safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who are
older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older
WARNING!
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
Seat Anchorage System.)
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
2
84
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltchild to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
the back.
lap/shoulder belt.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend system provides for the installation of the child restraint
over the front of the seat when their back is against the without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
structure.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now availas possible.
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
slouching can move the belt out of position.
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
85
anchors can be readily identified by the symbol located on
the seatback directly above the anchorages and are just
visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces. The vehicle’s seat belt must be used for the
center position. Regardless of the specific type of lower
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
attachment, never install LATCH-compatible child seats
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
such that two seats share a common lower anchorage.
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
with, and never leave your child unattended in the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
vehicle.
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHThe rear outboard seating positions have lower
compatible, you can only install the child restraints using
anchorages capable of accommodating LATCHthe vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instruccompatible child seats having flexible,
tions, refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child
webbing-mounted lower attachments and child
Restraint System”.
seats with fixed lower attachments. The rear seat lower
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
2
86
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
Latch Anchorages
In addition, there are top tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
87
2
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
WARNING!
Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
88
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
They are not visible until you fold the gap panel down.
Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the floor
behind the seat. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
First, loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach
the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then,
locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where
you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether
strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether
strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor
and the child restraint. There are three top tether anchorages located on the back of the seat, behind the gap panel.
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belts
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR),
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate,
pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
it tight if necessary.
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position. To access the center seat arm rest
tether first lower the arm rest. The tether is located
behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat
backing.
For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR), pull the belt from the retractor until there is
enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint
and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the
belt until it is fully extended from the retractor. Allow the
belt to return into the retractor, pulling on the excess
webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
89
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2
90
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat and attach the hook to the top tether anchor located on
backing, then raise the armrest and attach the tether hook the back of the seat. To access the top tether strap
anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
to the strap located on the front of the arm rest.
panel away from the seat back, this will expose the top
tether strap anchorages.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
For center seating position route the tether strap over the
seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat. For the outboard
seating positions, route the tether under the head rests,
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
91
2
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
Top Tether Strap Mounting
92
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child
could be badly injured or killed.
Top Tether Strap Attachment
For the center seating position route the tether strap over
the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the top
tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind
the gap panel. For the outboard seating positions, route
the tether strap under the headrests and attach the hook
to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat
behind the gap panel. Please note the top tether anchorages are not visible until you fold the gap panel down.
Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the
floor behind the seats.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
93
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the SAFETY TIPS
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
mental and should be avoided.
AREA.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
WARNING!
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
cause serious injury or death.
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interbelts.
preted as an indication of difficulty.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
94
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
95
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Seat Belts
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
inoperable.
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
Airbag Warning Light
ways.
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
2
96
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
97
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
OutsideThe Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . 110
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 107
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 110
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 120
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 130 䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 145
▫ Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . 145
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 147
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 158
䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
. . . . . . 160
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . 174
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . 177
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . 178
䡵 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . 182
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . 167
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . 168
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . 188
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 192
▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Enabling And Disabling Park Sense威 . . . . . . 197
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
103
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 204
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 210
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 199
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink威 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off —
With Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . 203
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Venting Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Closing Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Opening Power Shade – Express . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Closing Power Shade – Express . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Sunroof And Power Shade Movement –
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
䡵 Command View Sunroof With Power Shade —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Opening Sunroof – Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Pinch Protect Override Cancellation . . . . . . . 218
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
105
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 236
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position. The mirror
head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various
drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The mirror is twisted on the
windshield button counterclockwise and requires no
tools for mounting.
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles
will not have a convex passenger side mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped
The driver and passenger outside mirrors will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming
mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button
at the base of the inside mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
Outside Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
3
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
111
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the The BSM system can also be configured to sound an
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light audible (chime) alert and reduces the radio volume to
located in the outside mirrors.
notify the driver of objects that have entered the detection zones. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further
information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Warning Light Location
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
115
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Opposing Traffic
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
117
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
3
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
Blind Spot Alert
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
WARNING!
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the radio volume is reduced.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime, the
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio volume (if on) will also be
reduced.
119
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
system, the radio volume is reduced.
Uconnect™ Phone is a hands-free system that allows you
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in
the appropriate visual alert only.
your mobile phone. Press the Uconnect™ Phone button
on the radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped)
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
and
follow the instructions to pair the mobile phone.
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re- Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
quested, the radio volume is also reduced. Turn/ Manual located on the DVD for further details.
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always
requests the chime.
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Commands can be initiated by pressing the VR
located on the radio or steering wheel
button
controls (if equipped).
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
SEATS
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
backward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when you have reached the desired
position.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seatbelt.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING! (Continued)
Passenger’s Power Seat
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas(Continued) senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
123
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seatbelt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual front driver
or passenger seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
125
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seatbelt.
Adjustment Bar
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
WARNING!
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the seat.
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — within two to five minutes.
If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
Vehicle” for further information.
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
controls for each heater are located near the bottom center maximum of 45 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
of the instrument panel (below the climate controls).
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 55 minutes.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
129
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
maximum of 55 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.
There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the
driver and passenger to operate the seats independently.
The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
below the climate controls.
The ventilated seat switches are used
to control the speed of the fans located
in the seat. Press the switch once to
choose HIGH, press it a second time to
choose LOW. Pressing the switch a
third time will turn the ventilated seat
OFF. When HIGH speed is selected
both lights on the switch will be illuminated. When LOW
speed is selected one light will be illuminated.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System —
If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
131
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
133
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
3
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
Rear Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
135
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Rear Seat Release
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
room.
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to • Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
fold down easily.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Rear Seat Release
137
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
driver’s outside mirror, adjustable steering wheel position (if equipped), and the radio station preset settings.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also
be programmed to recall the same positions when the
UNLOCK button is pressed.
Driver Memory Buttons
Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One
or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory
position. The memory system can accommodate up to
four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the
two memory positions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory
139
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings remove the key.
for that button and store a new one.
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to driver’s door.
the ON position.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
transmitters.
Step 3.
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview
the ON position.
mirror to the desired positions.
11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
4. Adjust the power steering column tilt and telescoping
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ⬙Yes⬙. Refer
position (if equipped) to the desired positions.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
memory position 2.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S,
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
Memory Position Recall
driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory one second will occur before another recall can be
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not selected.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
remove the key.
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to 2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
memory position 1.
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
before continuing to Step 3.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
on the driver’s door.
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
vehicle.
button 1 on the driver’s door.
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
available:
button on the RKE transmitter.
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
transmitter.
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
• The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
driving position when the key is placed into the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward To open the hood, two latches must be released.
the ACC/ON position.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis- panel and in front of the driver’s door.
abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit/Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
143
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch Location
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
LIGHTS
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
Headlight Switch
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
light and instrument panel lights are also
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headturned
on.
To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
switch
back
to the O (Off) position.
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
145
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, also has this customer-programmable feature. When
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
lenses.
the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, further information.
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatialso on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
section for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
CAUTION!
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the To Activate
daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Elecdim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customerthis section for further information.
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your InstruSmartBeam™ — If Equipped
ment Panel” for further information.
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
lighting at night by automating high beam control
position.
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe- 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
replaced, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to
To Deactivate
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
dealer.
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
reactivate the system.
Only
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
system to function improperly.
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights and Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
The
fog
lights
will
operate only when the parking lights
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
are
on
or
when
the
vehicle headlights are on low beam.
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating headlights are required during the day.
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
Dimmer Control
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on ON.
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
Front Map/Reading Lights
the driver’s door is opened.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overBattery Saver
head console.
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way
up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
3
Ambient Light
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
151
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
steering column.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding the Features
of Your Vehicle”.
3
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist Control
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
157
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandsensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensiing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
following conditions:
OFF position when not using the system.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
NOTE:
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUmay reduce Rain Sensing performance.
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
159
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in this section for further information.
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel and seat can be programmed to
come on during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting
System — If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the steering wheel heater to
overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
161
3
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
163
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
To Deactivate
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set decrease until the button is released. Release the button
speed memory.
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed (2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
3
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have a collision. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so IF EQUIPPED
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
Control.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while matching
the speed of the vehicle ahead.
165
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
− Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (i.e., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
− Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight
distance conditions.
− Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate
for such changes.
− Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
− May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light
(for example, sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on
the front of the vehicle.
− Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s
braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle to a
complete stop.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations
(i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes; and when towing a trailer.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
167
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section. Note: The system will not react to
preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
DISTANCE SETTING
RES +
SET CANCEL
ON/OFF
MODE
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise conditions:
Control.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
25 mph (40 km/h).
• When the parking brake is set.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
169
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
3
170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set speed. If this occurs:
speed.
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
ACC Set
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
171
To Cancel
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• If the transmission is shifted into Neutral.
Driver Override
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS is To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
off, ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
memory if:
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
• You switch off ESC.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume Speed
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of
20 mph (32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. This
could cause a collision and/or serious injury.
173
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
EVIC display.
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by NOTE:
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to insufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
crease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the button is
will automatically slow the vehicle.
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
display.
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
vehicle to a complete stop.
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
3
174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Setting 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
175
3
Distance Setting 2
Distance Setting 1
176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button • The distance setting is changed.
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
setting adjusts between long, medium, and short.
ACC Activation).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; howset speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indinecessary.
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
the set speed.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
speed.
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
the sensor.
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
from the vehicle ahead.
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
itself.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
177
Press the MENU button (located on the steering wheel) repeatedly until one of the following displays in the EVIC:
Menu
Button
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
− When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Brake Alert
− When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument ACC SET
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The − When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
3
178
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
while ACC is set.
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Acquisition/Loss of Target
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
The EVIC will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
activity occurs, which may include any of the following: system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
• Set Speed Change
Example Only
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
179
system may also become temporarily blinded due to Control is still available. For additional information refer
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of section.
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Clear Radar Sensor Warning
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of • If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
authorized dealer for service.
3
180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, To remove the sensor follow these instructions:
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
1. Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
the connector and pulling it out. Do not pull by the
malfunction.
wiring or using any tools to remove the connector.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
2. Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
back of the bracket.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
3. Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an to the bumper.
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom- NOTE: Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC the sensor off of the bracket. Doing so may misalign the
operation.
sensor.
Removing ACC Sensor For Off-Roading
Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location.
NOTE: When off-roading, it may be advisable to re- The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after
move the ACC sensor. The sensor is located behind the the sensor and bracket assembly is removed.
front lower grille in the center of the vehicle. After A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam.
removing the lower fascia, you may remove the lower Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug.
sensor and bracket assembly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When the sensor is removed, Adaptive Cruise
Control, Normal Cruise Control, and Forward Collision
Warning will not be available. The cluster will display the
warning “ACC/FCW Unavailable - Service Radar Sensor.”
To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the
process above. The fastener torque required to assembly
the bracket back to the beam is 6.6 ft lbs (9 Nm).
181
Service ACC Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
ACC Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning
3
182
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a hitch, such as reduced
detection range, please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
183
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
3
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
184
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
185
3
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
Classification Specifications:
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
47 C.F.R. Part 15
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
47
C.F.R Part 15.515
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
186
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
To change modes, press the MODE button when the
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.
“Cruise Ready” will be displayed if the system was in
ACC READY or ACC SET position. “Cruise Off” will be
displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position. To
switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, press the
MODE button a second time.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-tovehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a
safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
187
To Vary The Speed Setting
There are two ways to change the set speed:
To Resume
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
speed.
desired speed and press the SET - button.
To Turn Off
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
the set speed in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments respecmemory if:
tively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
(10 km/h) increments.
To Cancel
• You turn off the ignition.
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
• You switch off ESC.
erasing the memory if:
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
• You press the CANCEL button.
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- Normal Cruise Control).
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
188
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) warns the driver of a
potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and
prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision.
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
FCW Message
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
189
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
3
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will be
displayed in the EVIC.
Example Only
190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This in front of you.
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
Example Only
Example Only
NOTE: In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed
in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
191
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the unavailable screens.
FCW Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
FCW Off Example
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
NOTE:
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
driver after ignition shut down.
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
3
192
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ACC/FCW Unavailable Warning
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞 Warning Display
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
193
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
3
Rear Park Assist Display
194
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Rear Park Assist Disabled
Rear Park Assist ON
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
195
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
3
Fast Tone
Slow Tone
196
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Display Message
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Park Assist ON
Arcs
None
Radio Mute
No
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
Warning Object
Warning Object
Detected
Detected
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling and Disabling Park Sense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
197
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
Warning Object
Detected
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Warning Object
Detected
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the ParkSense威 switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for
3
198
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense威 switch LED will be ON when ParkSense威 is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威 switch
LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
Service the ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
will not operate.
The ParkSense威 system uses four sensors located in the
rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in
(200 cm) away from the rear bumper fascia. The warning
display located above in the Instrument Cluster’s EVIC
provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
the range of the object.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and the
rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction, see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
199
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the • When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
EVIC, see your authorized dealer.
will display “PARK ASSIST OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off until you turn
Cleaning the ParkSense姞 System
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the instrument
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damcluster will display “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for
age the sensors.
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
NOTE:
sounding a tone.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operat- • Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
ing properly.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
3
200
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
201
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
3
202
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView威 camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
203
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
2. Select “system setup” soft key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.
3
204
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
5. Press the “save” soft key.
Turning ParkView姞 On or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
2. Select “system setup” soft key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Located on the overhead console are two courtesy/
reading lights. Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press
a second time to turn the lights off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
205
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open. Push the
chrome pad on the door to close.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is
opened, when the UNLOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the
dimmer wheel is moved up to the dome ON position.
Sunglass Storage
3
206
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink威 channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
207
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
3
208
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away • After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the gakeeping the indicator light in view.
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
System.”
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and handheld transmitter buttons.
and observe the indicator light.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
open and close while you train.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
NOTE:
then turns to a constant light, proceed to “Programming
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may A Rolling Code System.”
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
Programming A Rolling Code System
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
209
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 1. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
2. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
210
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink威
button. Activation will now occur for the trained device
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
(i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system,
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The handheld
door or gate motor.
transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink姞 Button
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
follow these steps:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has suc- 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
cessfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
release the button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
211
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program- • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Security
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
General Information
erased.
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
are some of the most common solutions:
received including interference that may cause undesired
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
operation.
3
212
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not visors on the overhead console.
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
213
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
3
214
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re- Sunshade Operation
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
disabled.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
Pinch Protect Override
open.
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
Wind Buffeting
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
to move toward the closed position.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurpressed.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Venting Sunroof — Express
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
215
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switches remain active for up approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has
been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
COMMAND VIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The command view sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
3
Command View Sunroof and Power Shade Switches
216
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof – Express
Press the sunroof switch rearward for less than one second
and release, and the sunroof glass will automatically slide
fully open from any position, then stop. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
sunroof switch press or shade switch press will stop the
sunroof. If the shade is closed when the sunroof switch is
pressed, the shade will automatically move to the middle
position before the sunroof begins Express Open operation.
Venting Sunroof – Express
Press the center “Vent” button on the sunroof switch for
less than one second and release, and the sunroof glass
will automatically vent fully open from any position,
then stop. This is called “Express Vent”. During Express
Vent operation, any sunroof switch press or shade switch
press will stop the sunroof. If the shade is closed when
the vent switch is pressed, the shade will automatically
move to the middle position before the sunroof begins
Express Vent operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof – Express
Press the sunroof switch forward for less than one second
and release, and the sunroof glass will automatically
close from any position, then stop. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any sunroof
switch press or shade switch press will stop the sunroof.
217
Closing Power Shade – Express
Press the shade switch forward for less than one second
and release, and the shade will automatically close, then
stop. This is called “Express Shade Close”. If the sunroof
is not at the closed position and the shade is rearward of
the middle position, the shade will move to the middle
position then stop. If the sunroof is not at the closed
Opening Power Shade – Express
position and the shade is at the middle position, the
Press the shade switch rearward for less than one second
sunroof will automatically move to the fully closed posiand release, and the shade will automatically open, then
tion before the shade begins Express Shade Close operastop. This is called “Express Shade Open”. If the shade is
tion. During Express Shade Close operation, any sunroof
forward of the middle position, it will move to the
switch press or shade switch press will stop the shade.
middle position then stop. If the shade is at or rearward
of the middle position, it will move to the full open Sunroof and Power Shade Movement – Manual
position then stop. During Express Shade Open opera- If any sunroof or shade switch is pressed and held for
tion, any sunroof switch press or shade switch press will more than one second, the sunroof or shade movement
will continue only as long as the switch is continuously
stop the shade.
held. Whenever the switch is released, any sunroof or
shade movement will stop. This allows the sunroof or
shade to be stopped at any desired partially open position.
3
218
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof or the shade during any close operation. If an
obstruction is detected, the sunroof or shade will automatically reverse direction to release the obstruction. If
this occurs, remove the obstruction and then press the
sunroof or shade switch forward to complete the desired
close motion.
Method 2: If three consecutive sunroof or shade close
attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close
attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch
Protect disabled.
Pinch Protect Override Cancellation
Once the sunroof or shade reaches the closed position,
Pinch Protect will reactivate. In addition, if any other
switch is pressed which moves the sunroof or shade
Pinch Protect Override
away from the closed position, Pinch Protect will
Method 1: If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc) reactivate.
prevents closing of the sunroof or shade, press the
Wind Buffeting
corresponding switch forward and hold for two seconds
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
after the reversal motion ends. After two seconds, all
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
closing motions will be manual and will have Pinch
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Protect disabled. This will allow the sunroof or shade to
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
move towards the closed position.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
219
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs Sunroof Fully Closed
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
the glass panel.
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switches can be programmed to The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Refer to “Elec- Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer- the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
Programmable Features (System Setup)” under “Under- the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE: Opening either front door will cancel this NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
feature.
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
3
220
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
221
3
Center Console Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
222
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron(Continued) ics and other low power devices requiring power up to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
223
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play- the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
most power tools.
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed,
there will be a delay of approximately one second before
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload the inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicaprotection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once inverter is producing AC power.
Power Inverter
3
224
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
Front Cupholder Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
225
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
3
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
226
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
latch and lower the glove box door.
access.
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
227
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
Center Console
The center console contains both an upper and a lower the small latch located on the lid.
storage area.
3
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
228
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
lower storage compartment.
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Lower Storage Compartment
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
Press And Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
229
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, Cargo Storage Bins
There are four removable storage bins located in the rear
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either
side of the cargo area.
3
Three-Press Switch
Rear Storage Bins
230
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
Lower Storage Bins
Tether Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
231
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
3
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
232
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
233
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
(Continued)
3
234
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the control lever. The control lever is located
on the left side of the steering column.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will
activate the washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release
of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear
wiper operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF
position, rotating it downward will activate the rear
washer pump which will continue to operate as long as
the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle two
times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
235
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park” window defroster only when the engine is operating.
position.
If the liftgate flipper glass is open, the rear window
wiper/washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper
stops at that “park” position. When the liftgate flipper
glass is closed, the rear wiper will resume wiper/washer
functionality after five seconds.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
236
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired position,
retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approxiNOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
mately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
dealer can order and install MOPAR威 crossbars built
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
specifically for this roof rack system.
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying • If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight • The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
turns using the anti-theft wrench provided with the
MOPAR威 crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
237
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 268
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 254
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Tire Psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 293
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 294
▫ Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped . . . 284
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 285
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 304
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 304
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 309
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
241
䡵 iPod威/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 309 䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 315
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Sirius Backseat TV™) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 316
䡵 Video Entertainment System™
(Sales Code XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 320
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Dual-Zone Manual Heating And Air
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Climate Controls
Lower Switch Bank
Storage Bin
Ignition Switch
9 — Fuel Door Release
10 — Headlight Switch
11 — Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
243
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
(RPM x 1000).
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
2. Airbag Warning Light
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
not require towing.
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, then have the system inspected at an
CAUTION!
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
Vehicle” for further information.
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
required.
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
245
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inthat caused the ESC activation.
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Hill Descent Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
5. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill
This light will illuminate when the TOW/
Decent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
HAUL button has been selected. The TOW/
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
HAUL button is located in the center of the
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
instrument panel (below the climate controls).
Low” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
6. Turn Signal Indicator
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attemptThe arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals
ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator lamp will
when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will
flash on/off.
chime, and an EVIC message will appear if the turn
10. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
signals are left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Display/Odometer Display
7. High Beam Indicator
The odometer display shows the total distance the veIndicates that headlights are on high beam.
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
8. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
lights are on.
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.
11. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
247
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
4
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
249
14. Brake Warning Light
12. Position Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light monitors various brake functions,
This indicator will illuminate when the park
including brake fluid level and parking brake
lights or headlights are turned on.
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
13. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sysRefer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
sary.
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
251
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is 16. 4 LOW
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked toThis light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
wheels.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
17. Speedometer
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
Indicates vehicle speed.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Red
18. Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the Telltale Area
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tellvehicle where the fuel door is located.
tales. For further information refer to “Electronic vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)”.
19. Fuel Gauge
23. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
Light — If Equipped
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) White
Telltale Area
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white
telltales. For further information refer to “Electronic 24. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
21. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
Amber Telltale Area
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
caution telltales. For further information refer to “Elecignition is first turned on.
tronic vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately, and call an authorized dealership for service.
253
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC consists of the following:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
• System Status
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
instrument cluster.
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
255
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units,
System Setup) and sub menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and sub
menus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub menus or to select a
personal setting in the setup menu. Press and
hold the SELECT button for two seconds to
reset features.
4
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BACK Button
• Right front turn signal lamp out
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
• Left rear turn signal lamp out
previous menu or sub menu.
• Right rear turn signal lamp out
• Check Tire Pressure
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• ESC System Off
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
• Service blind spot system
the following messages:
• Blind spot detection unavailable
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Blind spot system off
• Service Park Assist System
• Blind spot system unavailable sensor blocked
• Park Assist System Blinded
• Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise Con• Park Assist Disabled
trol (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to
• Keyfob Battery Low
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
• Liftglass Open
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Left front turn signal lamp out
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
257
• Adaptive Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise • Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adapsetting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated. • Distance Set — After changing the desired following
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Underdistance in the ACC system, this message will display
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
Vehicle” (if equipped).
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if • Brake — If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
equipped).
distance, this message will flash and a chime will
• ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immeThe Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
• Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a
distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive
slower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
4
258
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle — If the • Oil change due
ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting
• Key in ignition
conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if • Lights on
equipped).
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error — If the
• Ignition or Accessory On
ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction
that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise • Ignition or Accessory On. Lights On
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
• Turn signal on
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Park assist on
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor — If the
ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault • Warning object detected
that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understand• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Coolant low
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Service air suspension system
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote start disabled — System fault
• Function currently unavailable — Power Liftgate
• Remote start disabled — Turn key
• Unlock to operate — Power Liftgate
• Remote start active — Key to Run
• Put in Park to operate — Power Liftgate
• Memory 1 profile set
• Automatic high beams on
• Memory 2 profile set
• Automatic high beams off
• Memory system unavailable — Not in Park
• Service Four Wheel Drive System
• Memory system unavailable — Seatbelt buckled
• Four Wheel Drive System in neutral
• Memory 1 profile recall
• ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator
• Memory 2 profile recall
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — AUTOMATIC
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — ROCK
• Wrong Key
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SAND/MUD
• Damaged Key
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SNOW
• Key not programmed
• TERRAIN SETTINGS — SPORT
259
4
260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sport Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required
• Rock Not Available in 4 Low 4 High is Required
• Off Road Ride Height Level 1 — This message is
displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has
achieved the Off Road Height Level 1.
• To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
• Off Road Ride Height Level 2 — This message is
Owners Manual
displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has
• For 4x4 Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans in
achieved the Off Road Height Level 2.
N Press 4 Low
• Vehicle Lowered To Entry/Exit (Park) Height — This
• For 4x4 High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
message is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle
in N Press 4 Low
has achieved the Park Height.
• Terrain System Settings Not Available
• Entry/Exit (Park) Height in Progress — This message
is displayed (for 5 seconds) when the request is made
• Raising Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)
to go into Entry/Exit Height while the vehicle speed is
• Lowering Vehicle Ride Height (with icon)
between 15 and 25 mph. This shows that the request
has been recognized and will lower to Entry/Exit
• Normal Vehicle Ride Height — This message is disheight when vehicle is below 15 mph.
played (for 5 seconds) when the vehicle has achieved
the Normal Vehicle Ride Height.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
261
• Service Air Suspension System — This is displayed • Air Suspension System Cooling Down – Please Wait —
when a fault has occurred in the system. The system
This message is displayed if the compressor temperawill have limited operation at that point.
ture level is too high. Level control is suspended until
the compressor has cooled down.
• Immediate Air Suspension Service/Repair Required
— This is displayed when a fault has occurred in the • Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered – Door Open — This
message is displayed if a door or the liftgate is ajar and
system which results in a complete system shutdown.
level control is suspended.
The system will be non operational at that point.
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height — • Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And
This message is displayed in advance warning to the
Tire Change
driver that the vehicle will be moved to the next lower
• Aerodynamic Ride Height — This is displayed (for
preset position unless the speed is reduced.
5 seconds) when the vehicle has achieved the Aerody• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted — The vehicle
namic Height.
speed is too high to enter one of the preset levels
(Entry/Exit Level/Off Road Ride Height Level 1/Off
Road Ride Height Level 2).
4
262
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC White Telltale Lights
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tellThis light will turn on when the electronic
tales. These telltales include:
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under• Shift Lever Status
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1” • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And OperFeatures Of Your Vehicle”.
ating”
• Electronic Speed Control ON
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
speed control is ON. For further information,
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “UnderCruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Power Steering System Over Temperature —
If Equipped
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on the
EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused
an over temperature condition in the power steering
system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer
exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system will cool
and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power Steering”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
263
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and
prompts the driver to take action in order to
avoid the collision. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
NOTE:
• Air Suspension Up
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operaThe air suspension up telltale will illuminate
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
when the air suspension is in use. For further
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
information, refer to “Starting And Operating”.
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
4
264
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Air Suspension Down
The air suspension down telltale will illuminate when the air suspension is in use. For
further information, refer to “Starting And Operating”.
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
• Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
washer fluid is low.
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
• SERV 4WD
The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift
• Loose Gascap Indicator
4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
comes on during driving, it means that the
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
4WD system is not functioning properly and
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
that service is required.
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
265
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
telltales include:
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
• Door Ajar
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
more door may be ajar.
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
may be ajar.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
• Liftgate Flipper Glass Ajar
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
flipper glass may be ajar.
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
4
266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging If the light remains lit with the engine running your
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho- vehicle, will usually be drivable, however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
rized dealer.
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
required and you may experience reduced performance,
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
may require towing.
This light informs you of a problem with the
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This light warns of an overheated engine condilight will come on when the ignition is first
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apturned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is to cool.
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
267
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
4
268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy functime you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
tions displays in the EVIC:
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica- • Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
refer to the following procedure.
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
269
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Trip Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode —
If Equipped
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
4
Fuel Saver Mode — On
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
Vehicle Speed
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
EVIC.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Trip Info
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the following Trip functions displays in
the EVIC:
• Trip A
• Trip B
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
271
• Elapsed Time
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
Trip Computer functions.
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa- resettable functions, press and hold the SELECT button
for two seconds. Current display will reset along with
tion:
other functions
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last Units
reset.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
Trip B
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
reset.
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
Elapsed Time
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON selected.
or START position.
4
272
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “SYSTEM” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display anyone of the following choices.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the hours of engine operation.
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the following System Status messages
displays in the EVIC:
• System OK
• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
active System Warnings)
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pressure of all four road tires). For additional information,
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting
And Operating”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
273
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go
icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the
EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operating” for more information.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
NOTE:
• Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat always re-appears.
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi Compass / Temperature Display
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures” facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
in “Starting And Operating” for additional informa- readings and the outside temperature.
tion.
Tire Pressure Display
4
274
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
Automatic Compass Calibration
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may 2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or then press the SELECT button.
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
displayed in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
275
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
4
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
then press the SELECT button.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
276
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
Select Language
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Neder5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.
lands). Then, as you continue, the information will disCustomer-Programmable Features (System Setup)
play in the selected language.
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is Nav–Turn By Turn
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning When this feature is selected, the navigation system
message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in three utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinaseconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
displays in the EVIC.
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
following choices.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Lock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
277
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
Auto Unlock Doors
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highWhen this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
setting has been selected.
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enterfeature showing the system has been activated, or the N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
check-mark is removed showing the system has been Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
deactivated.
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
4
278
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
programmed touching the handle more than once will
only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected, you can use your RKE
transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
(if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button a check-mark appears next to the feature showing
the system has been activated or the check-mark is
removed, showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the remote start is activated.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
279
Horn with Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed, showing the
system has been deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed, showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected.
4
280
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headlamps with Wipers
(Available with Automatic Headlamps Only)
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available with Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Tilt Mirror in Reverse
When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
281
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display, this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
4
282
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Wiper Mode — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
Auto High Beams (Available with SmartBeam™
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
Only)
or the check-mark is removed, showing the system has
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
been deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
operation.
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark Hill Start Assist (HSA)
is removed, showing the system has been deactivated. When this feature is selected, the HSA system is active.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Un- Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further And Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
information.
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed, showing the system has been
deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blind Spot Alert
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert.
By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once, the
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot:
Lights Only” mode. When this mode is selected the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By pressing and
releasing the SELECT button a second time “Blind Spot:
Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this mode the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside
mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is
on. When “Blind Spot: Off” is selected the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
283
Forward Collision Warning
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more
dynamic driving select the Near setting. This warns you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are much closer. This allows for a more
dynamic driving experience. To change FCW status press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed, showing the
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
system has been deactivated.
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise ConTake your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result Vehicle”.
in the BSM not operating to specification.
4
284
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Units of Measure In:
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
285
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES)
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
4
286
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button
RW/FF
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
and radio frequency.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Clock Setting Procedure
AM or FM frequencies.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
TUNE Control
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
will begin to blink.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to save time change.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
mid-range tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
287
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
this station and press and release that button. If a button
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the front and rear speakers.
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM Button
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
pressing the pushbutton twice.
4
288
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display.
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Buttons 1 - 6
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
stations).
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
DISC Button
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
MP3 Audio Play
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
NOTE:
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
position to operate the radio.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
289
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
290
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
291
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
4
292
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192,
160, 128, 112, 96,
80, 64, 56, 48, 40,
32
160, 128, 144, 112,
96, 80, 64, 56, 48,
40, 32, 24, 16, 8
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
supported by the radios.
to load than non-multisession discs
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
supported.
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
293
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
294
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
ACC position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
Electronic Volume Control
If Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
volume and to the left decreases it.
details.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
set at the same volume level as last played.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
295
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
screen.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TIME Button
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
and radio frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
Clock Setting Procedure
procedure, starting at Step 2.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
296
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
297
16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
4
298
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
AM/FM Button
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SETUP Button
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
be stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
299
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
4
300
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
CAUTION!
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
301
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW/FF
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricbegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
tions.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
works in a similar manner.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
AM/FM Button
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
4
302
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeLevel 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
character extension)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
character extension)
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of files: 255
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file longer disc loading times.
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to Supported MP3 File Formats
display the file name and folder name and will assign The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extena number instead. With a maximum number of files, sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
not play the file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192,
160, 128, 112, 96,
80, 64, 56, 48, 40,
32
160, 128, 144, 112,
96, 80, 64, 56, 48,
40, 32, 24, 16, 8
303
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
increase with more files and folders
supported by the radios.
4
304
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a time⬙ priority mode.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
before writing to the disc.
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
playable files).
vehicle speakers.
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
305
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the System Activation
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
down.
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welPress this button to change the display to time of day. The
come kit that contains general information, including
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
ignition is OFF).
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
If Equipped
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastElectronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Number (ESN/SID)
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Please have the following information available when
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
calling:
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
limited coverage in Alaska.
4
306
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
form of short audio mutes.
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
307
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
ACC position to operate the radio.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
SEEK Buttons
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display).
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
RW/FF
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
direction of the arrows.
without stopping until you release it.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
4
308
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
and press and release that button. If a button is not
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butexited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
309
iPod姞/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RER, REN, RBZ, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen
radio iPod威 /MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RER, REN, RBZ, RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. iPod威 /MP3
control is available only if equipped as an option with
these radios.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
button number will display.
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
Buttons 1 - 6
or glove compartment.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
iPod威 /MP3 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
iPod威 and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software verOperating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) —
sions may not fully support the iPod威 /MP3 control
If Equipped
features. Please visit Apple’s website for software upRefer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User dates.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
4
310
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞 or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console or glove compartment.
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
311
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to • The audio device can be controlled using the radio
the vehicle’s iPod威 /MP3 control system (iPod威 or exterbuttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
nal USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
pressing radio switches, as described below.
audio device)
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely disControlling The iPod姞 or External USB Device
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威 /MP3
Using Radio Buttons
control system until a minimum charge is attained.
To get into the iPod威 /MP3 control (iPod威 or external
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威 /MP3
USB device) mode and access a connected audio device,
control system may charge it to the required level.
either press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate or
Using This Feature
press VR button and say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to in the iPod威 /MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if availUSB port:
able from audio device) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
4
312
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play Mode
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
When switched to iPod威 /MP3 control mode, the iPod威
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
or external USB device automatically starts Play mode. In
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate
the current track.
may be used to control the iPod威 or external USB device
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
and display data:
holding the FF >> button.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
previous track.
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
seconds.
playing a track, skips to the next track or press VR
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
list, or can press VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
press VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
Track⬙.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
313
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
device, or press VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 /MP3 device scan
mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of each • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the or
track in the current list and then forward to the next
song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockSCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previthe track detail on the radio display. Once the track
ous and next tracks.
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
4
314
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
315
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ phone system.
Controlling BTSA using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to Uconnect™
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to Uconnect™
phone system, but just one can be selected and played.
Selecting different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
4
316
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect™ Multimedia
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
(SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
3. Say name of the audio device or ask Uconnect™
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
phone system to list audio devices.
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. Uconnect™
Next Track
studio (SIRIUS Backseat TV™) offers three video chanUse the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the nels for family entertainment, directly from its satellites
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track and broadcasting studios.
music on your cellular phone.
NOTE: SIRIUS Backseat TV™ service is not available in
Previous Track
Hawaii or Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska.
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
Refer to the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
DVD, RER Navigation, RHB Multimedia or RBZ Multiprevious track music on your cellular phone.
media User Manuals for detailed operating instructions.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM™
(SALES CODE XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
current song that is playing will display info.
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
317
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia” section of
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the
front seats.
4
Remote Control Location
Lowering the Display Screen
318
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
319
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
320
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- Dual-Zone Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be The Dual-Zone Manual Climate Controls allow both
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when driver and front passenger seat occupants to select indinot using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
vidual comfort settings. The controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
Temperature Controls
• Driver Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment for the left front seat
occupant. Rotating the dial left into
the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
321
• Passenger Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment for the right front seat
occupant. Rotating the dial left into
the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
322
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Push the mode control buttons to choose from several
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
patterns of air distribution.
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument Mix
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Bi-Level
Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there mum blower and temperature settings for best windis a difference in temperature between the upper and shield and side window defrosting.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
323
NOTE:
NOTE:
• In Floor, Mix and Defrost modes a small amount of air • Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
will flow through the outboard panel outlets for
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
occupant comfort.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, • The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehubecause of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
Recirculation Control
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbbe used when outside conditions such as
ing the mode control selection.
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position or the ignition switch START/STOP button is
control button to illuminate.
cycled to OFF, the recirculation feature will be
cancelled.
4
324
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning System is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
• When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using a
push button on the control unit and a comfort temperature setting by using the temperature up and
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
down buttons.
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for op• MAX A/C
timum comfort and convenience.
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
buttons at the same time.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
• ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
325
2. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the left
front seat occupant.
4. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel,
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
1. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
5. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
front seat occupant.
7. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
4
326
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The 11. Blower Control
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the
selected.
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set- 12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
tings.
OFF
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature 13. Mode Control Button
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
10. Auto Temperature Control Button
ATC to switch into manual mode.
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and 14. SYNC Button
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for Press and release to control the temperature setting for
more information. Performing this function will cause both zones from the driver temperature control.
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
327
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
15. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
function automatically.
16. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
Automatic Operation
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
comfort as quickly as possible.
Control (ATC) Panel.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
4
328
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
features.
Auto mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, by selecting one of the following positions.
temperature control will continue to operate automatiPanel Mode
cally.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
Use the outer dial control to regulate direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
the amount of air forced through the and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
system in any mode you select. The to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
blower speed increases as you move wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
the control clockwise and decreases amount of airflow from these outlets.
Blower Control when you move the control counter- Bi-Level Mode
clockwise.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
outlets and defrost outlets.
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
329
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL temperature settings for best windshield and side winmode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the
blower will automatically default to medium-high unless
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
the blower is controlled manually.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
air is directed through the defrost and side window will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
demister outlets.
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window Air Conditioning (A/C)
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool
while keeping the windshield clear.
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
Defrost Mode
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
Air comes from the windshield and side window
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
deactivate the A/C system.
4
330
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
mode is not allowed in the Floor/Defrost Mix and
Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, Operating Tips
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Window Fogging
Recirculation Control
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button. will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
vehicle.
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation DEFROST mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
331
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
obstructions.
Summer Operation
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature trailer
tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance
may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from
overheating during the high load condition.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
4
332
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 346
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 346
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below 20°F Or ⫺7°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Quadra-Trac I威 Operating Instructions/
Precautions – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
5
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Quadra-Trac II威 Operating Instructions/
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . .
Precautions – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . .
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped . . .
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ When To Use 4WD Low Range –
▫ Quadra-Drive威 II System – If Equipped . . . . 359
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . 367
. . . . . . . . . 368
. . . . . . . . . 368
. . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Selec-Terrain™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
䡵 Quadra-Lift™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
STARTING AND OPERATING
335
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Rain Brake Support – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
(If Equipped) — 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel
Drive Models With MP3023 Two-Speed
Transfer Case Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 387
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 396
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
5
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 403 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 412
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
䡵 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 423
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
STARTING AND OPERATING
337
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ E85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 429
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 442
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
5
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Towing This Vehicle
Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I威
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II威 /
Quadra–Drive威 II Four-Wheel
Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
339
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
before shifting into any driving gear.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
Installing and Removing the ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing the Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
position.
Removing the Button
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
button loose.
STARTING AND OPERATING
341
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK START/STOP Button
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Normal Starting
Using the ENGINE START/STOP Button
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
accelerator pedal.
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressbutton is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
PARK position, or it could roll.
5
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
OFF position.
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
OFF the Brake Pedal (In PARK or NEUTRAL
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
Position)
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition switch positions Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F or ⫺7°C)
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availfollow these steps.
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
343
Clearing a Flooded Engine
(Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using Fob With Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
5
344
STARTING AND OPERATING
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor The engine block heater cord is located:
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
• 3.6L Engine – coiled and strapped to the engine oil
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
dipstick tube.
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
• 5.7L Engine – bundled and fastened to the injector
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
harness.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
345
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Once
the key fob is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
5
346
STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or
START position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to
the LOCK position first.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever into the PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
347
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
DRIVE
This range should be selected only when the vehicle is at
a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied. The
transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
5
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the shift lever left (-) or right (+) when the
shift lever is in the DRIVE position, allowing you to limit
the highest available gear. For example, if the driver
shifts the transmission into ERS 3 (third gear), the transmission will never shift above third gear, but can shift
down to 2 (second) or 1 (first), when needed.
3.6L Engine
When in the DRIVE position, the first tap to the left (-)
will shift down one gear and will display that gear. For
example, if you are in DRIVE and are in fifth gear, when
you tap the shift lever one time to the left (-), the
transmission will downshift to fourth gear and the display will show 4. Another tap to the left (-) will shift the
transmission into third gear.
5.7L Engine
On vehicles equipped with the 5.7L engine, use of ERS (or
TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during throughgear accelerations. This additional gear improves vehicle
performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer
on certain grades. ERS 1, 2, and 3 are underdrive gears;
• If you push and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the
ERS 4 is direct drive. ERS 5 (Overdrive) is the same as the
right (+), the transmission will exit the gear limiting
normal 4th gear. When in the DRIVE position in first
mode and shift to the appropriate gear. The display
through fourth gear, the first tap to the left (-) will display
will read ⬙D⬙.
NOTE:
• If you pull and hold (not tap) the shift lever to the left
(-), the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear
that can be attained without overrevving the engine.
The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and
will limit the top gear to the one displayed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
the ERS designation for the current gear (the transmission will not downshift). For example, if you are in
DRIVE and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the
shift lever one time to the left (-), the display will show 4
(ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap to the left (-) will shift
the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive
gear). When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear, the first
tap to the left (-) will downshift the transmission and
display 5 (ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear).
Another tap to the left (-) will shift the transmission
down to ERS 4 (direct gear).
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s) Allowed
1
1
349
2
3
4 5* D
1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5
* Applies to vehicles equipped with 5.7L engines only.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
left “D(-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift to
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed
down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear for 3.6L engine, fourth
and fifth gears for 5.7L engine). The transmission will
automatically shift to Overdrive, if the following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in DRIVE;
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature;
5
350
STARTING AND OPERATING
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
(48 km/h);
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
temperature becomes hot enough, the “TRANSMISSION
• transmission has reached normal operating OVER TEMP” message may display, and the transmistemperature.
sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After cool down, the transmission will
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temresume normal operation.
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for The transmission will downshift from Overdrive, to the
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will most desirable gear, if the accelerator pedal is fully
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph
risen to a suitable level. Refer to the “Note” under (56 km/h).
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode – If Equipped
During cold temperature operation you may notice de- When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
layed upshifts, depending on engine and transmission heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting octemperature. This feature improves the warm-up time of curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
the engine and transmission.
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
STARTING AND OPERATING
351
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
under steady cruise conditions.
In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine
speed and load, an upshift, followed shortly thereafter by
a downshift, may occur. The “TOW/HAUL Indicator
Light” will turn off. This is a normal part of the overheat
protection strategy when operating in the TOW/HAUL
mode.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission
TOW/HAUL Switch
will remain in the current gear (3.6L engine) or in direct
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the gear (5.7L engine) until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
5
352
STARTING AND OPERATING
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
1. Stop the vehicle.
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
cally, at a calibrated speed, at light throttle. It engages at
3. Turn the engine off, and be sure to turn the ignition
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may reswitch to the LOCK position.
sult in a slightly different feeling or response during
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the en- normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed
drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration,
gine.
the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.
NOTE:
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
• The torque converter clutch may not engage until the
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usuPARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operally after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
ate. Only second gear (3.6L engine) or third gear (5.7L
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
engine) will be available in the DRIVE position. Have the
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
as possible.
This is normal. Manually shifting (using the ERS shift
control) between 4 (direct gear) and 5/D (Overdrive
STARTING AND OPERATING
gear) positions will demonstrate that the transmission
is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. For vehicles
with 5.7L engines (which have two Overdrive gears),
the transmission may not shift into the top Overdrive
gear (normal fifth gear) until the transmission fluid
and engine coolant are warm.
• If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
353
Rocking the Vehicle
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
between DRIVE and REVERSE, while applying slight
pressure to the accelerator.
NOTE: The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Traction Control System (TCS) (if equipped) should be turned
OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
354
STARTING AND OPERATING
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine, is most effective. Racing the engine or
spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift
lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating
and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between
“First” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h) or drivetrain damage may
result.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I姞 Operating Instructions/
Precautions – If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I威 is a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time fourwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I威 system is not appropriate
for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
355
Quadra-Trac II姞 Operating Instructions/
• NEUTRAL
Precautions – If Equipped
• 4WD LOW
The Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case is fully automatic in the
normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II威 This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.
transfer case provides three mode positions:
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Transfer Case Switch
• 4WD HI
5
356
STARTING AND OPERATING
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends Shift Positions
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
cause damage to the transfer case.
4WD AUTO
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
sand, and dry hard pavement.
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain威 – If Equipped” in “StartWARNING!
ing and Operating” for further information on the various positions and their intended usages.
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N NEUTRAL
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position from the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing”
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
4WD LOW
brake should always be applied when the driver is
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It locks the
not in the vehicle.
front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front
STARTING AND OPERATING
357
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. It provides
additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain威 – If Equipped” for
further information on the various positions and their
intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
4WD HI to 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is
complete.
5
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put
Trans in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
358
STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW to 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the
“4WD LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The
“4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster
will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer
case motor temperature protection condition exists, a
“For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low” message will flash from the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow
the shift.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, engine off.
2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.
3. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,
etc.) for four seconds until the LED light by the switch
starts to blink indicating shift in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
complete. A “To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
Procedure in Owners Manual” message will display on
STARTING AND OPERATING
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Neutral Switch
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
359
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Quadra-Drive姞 II System – If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive威 II System features two
torque transfer couplings. The couplings include an
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and
the Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case. The optional ELSD axle
is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate.
Under normal driving conditions, the unit functions as a
standard axle, balancing torque evenly between left and
right wheels. With a traction difference between left and
right wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference.
As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque
will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less
traction, to the wheel that has traction. While the transfer
5
360
STARTING AND OPERATING
case and axle coupling differ in design, their operation is
similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case shifting
information, preceding this section, for shifting this
system.
SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
Selec-Terrain™ consists of the following positions:
• Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Only available in 4WD High range. Performance based tuning
that provides a rear wheel drive feel but with improved handling and acceleration over a two-wheel
drive vehicle. The Electronic Stability Control will set
STARTING AND OPERATING
to allow more driver control of vehicle while maintaining safe handling controls. The vehicle will lower (if
equipped with Air Suspension) to Aero Mode in High
Range. 4WD Low is not available in SPORT mode, if
4WD Low is selected the Selec-Terrain™ will auto•
matically switch back to AUTO.
361
traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. If equipped with air suspension, the
level will change to NRH.
Sand/Mud – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding
may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air
suspension, the level will change to Off-Road 1.
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped
• Rock – Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
with air suspension, the level will change to Normal
Low range. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air
Ride Height (NRH) if the transfer case is in high range.
Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction
The level will change to Off-Road 1 if the transfer case
based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on
is in Low range.
high traction off-road surfaces. Activates the Hill De• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
scent Control for steep downhill control. Use for low
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
5
362
STARTING AND OPERATING
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle level will
change to Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain™ switch is in
ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched from
4WD Low to 4WD High, the Selec-Terrain™ system
will return to AUTO.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Up Button
Down Button
Park Mode Indicator Lamp
Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp
Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp
Description
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system provides full
time load leveling capability along with the benefit of
being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a • Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
button.
driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING
363
the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
OR1. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
1.3 in (33 mm) – This position should be the default
and Operating” for further information.
position for all off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A
smoother and more comfortable ride will result. Press
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.5 in
the “Up” button once from the NRH position while the
(13 mm) – This position provides improved aerodyvehicle speed is below 48 mph (77 km/h). When in the
namics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will
OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains between
automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle
40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater
speed remains between 62 mph (99 km/h) and 66 mph
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically lowered
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will
to NRH. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed
and Operating” for further information.
remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
2.6 in (65 mm) – This position is intended for offspeed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h). The vehicle will
roading use only where maximum ground clearance is
enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the
required. To enter OR2, press the “Up” button twice
Selec-Terrain™ knob is turned to the “SPORT” posifrom the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
tion. Turning the Selec-Terrain™ knob to the “AUTO”
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While
position will return the system to normal operation.
in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
5
364
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Park Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 1.5 in
(38 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier
passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of
the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo.
To enter Park Mode, press the “Down” button once
while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h)
the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle
speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph
(40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Park Mode
change will be cancelled. To exit Park Mode, press the
“Up” button once while in Park Mode or drive the
vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).
air suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain™” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the
Selec-Terrain™ switch. The height can be changed from
the default Selec-Terrain™ setting by normal use of the
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the
air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure
a proper appearance.
The system requires that the engine be running for all
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened
at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will
not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system uses a lifting
and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from
incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising
the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and
then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will
move down first and then the rear.
STARTING AND OPERATING
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift™ air
suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Press and hold both the
“Up” and “Down” buttons simultaneously between 5 and
10 seconds, a message will appear in the EVIC stating
leveling has been disabled immediately after both buttons
have been released. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Driving the vehicle over
5 mph (8 km/h) will return the air suspension to normal
operation. Refer to “Jacking and Tire Changing” in “What
To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your
authorized dealer for service.
365
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the EVIC display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
Operation
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show
the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator
lamps will show a position which the system is working
to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
flashing on the “Up” button, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the
⬙Up⬙ button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
5
366
STARTING AND OPERATING
Pressing the “UP” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming
all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below
threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pressed multiple
times, each press will raise the requested level by one
position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest
position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
speed, etc).
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic
changes and user requested changes.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
Pressing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, as- • Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.
suming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors
closed, speed below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button
can be pressed multiple times. Each press will lower the
requested level by one position down to a minimum of
Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Park Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated
when the vehicle is in Park Mode. If Park Mode is
requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4
will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as
the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed. If
vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator
lamp 3 will flash until Park Mode is achieved at which
point indicator lamp 3 will go solid. If during the
height change to Park Mode, the vehicle speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h), the height change will be paused
until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the height change continues to Park
Mode, or exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle
height will return to NRH. Park Mode may be selected
while the vehicle is not moving provided that the
engine is still running and all doors remain closed.
367
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
5
368
STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air
dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is attached to
the lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners
and can be removed by hand.
Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest
useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle
or terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be
raised as required by the changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the optimized height based on the SelecTerrain™ switch position. The vehicle height can be
changed from the default height for each Selec-Terrain™
mode by normal use of the air suspension switches. Refer
to “Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Front Air Dam
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
When To Use 4WD LOW Range – If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
STARTING AND OPERATING
369
Driving through water more than a few inches/
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
water, there are a number of precautions that must be safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
considered before entering the water.
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehito minimize wave effects.
cle’s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to
switch the system into recirculation mode during water Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
fording.
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes
CAUTION!
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm).
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
The flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Drivthat are downstream of your entry point to allow for
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
drifting.
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
5
370
STARTING AND OPERATING
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
STARTING AND OPERATING
371
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control Traction Downhill
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly
skidding the tires.
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
WARNING!
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or vehicle speed and direction.
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back care- repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmisfully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
sion whenever possible.
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
After Driving Off-Road
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
drive straight up or down.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a can get any problems taken care of right away and have
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion your vehicle ready when you need it.
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
5
372
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
correct the situation.
propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING
3.6L Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
STARTING AND OPERATING
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
373
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,
then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments
until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operamessage and a flashing icon are displayed on
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
and during parking maneuvers.
5
374
STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steerservice.
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
5.7L Engine
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
The standard power steering system will give you good
does not in any way damage the steering system.
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
WARNING!
steering capability if power assist is lost.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condiService should be obtained as soon as possible.
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
CAUTION!
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
375
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
5
376
STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS)
(IF EQUIPPED) — 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
The foot operated parking brake is located below the switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the the instrument cluster will illuminate.
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
377
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
5
378
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), Ready Alert Braking, Rain Brake Support and, if it
has four-wheel drive with the MP 3023 two-speed transfer case, Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
379
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
5
380
STARTING AND OPERATING
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
381
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
5
382
STARTING AND OPERATING
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed High Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models) or
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD HIGH
range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the
vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
4WD HIGH range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
The ESC system has two available operating modes in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
4WD HIGH range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and one
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
operating mode in 4WD LOW range.
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
STARTING AND OPERATING
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
383
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
4WD Low Range
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the
ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC OFF Switch
5
384
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
385
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
5
386
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in
PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll
down the hill and could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. Always remember to use
the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that
the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support – If Equipped
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
387
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel Drive
Models With MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case Only
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during off-road driving situations and is available in 4WD
LOW range only. To enable HDC, press the HDC switch
or put the Selec-Terrain™ system in “ROCK” mode
(“ROCK” mode is only available in 4WD LOW range).
5
Hill Descent Switch
388
STARTING AND OPERATING
When HDC is enabled, the HDC icon will be illuminated
in the instrument cluster. HDC will automatically apply
the brakes to control downhill speed to the selected level
when necessary on grades greater than approximately
8%. It will usually not activate on level ground.
HDC Operation in 4WD Low Range
To enable HDC, press the HDC switch or put the
Selec-Terrain™ system in the “ROCK” mode. The HDC
icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster and
HDC will function. If the vehicle speed goes above
20 mph (32 km/h), the HDC icon will flash and HDC will
The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the
not function. To disable HDC, press the HDC switch.
driving conditions. The speed corresponds to the trans4WD Low Range Set Speeds
mission gear selected.
HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the
usual manner. When either the brake or the accelerator is
released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the original set speed.
• 1st = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
• 2nd = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 3rd = 4 mph (6 km/h)
• 4th = 5.5 mph (9 km/h)
• 5th or D (Drive) = 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
• REVERSE = 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
STARTING AND OPERATING
• PARK = HDC will not function
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving only.
At vehicle speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h), HDC will no
longer function. When the vehicle speed drops below
20 mph (32 km/h), HDC function will automatically
resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set
speed.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
389
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
5
390
STARTING AND OPERATING
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac- TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
Tire Markings
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING
391
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaletters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall precedtion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European • Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designasize designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
392
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING
393
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
394
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING
395
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
396
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
397
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
5
398
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calcusengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
[295 kg]).
(392 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
399
400
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
401
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
5
402
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage it.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
outside temperature condition.
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
STARTING AND OPERATING
403
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial-Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
5
404
STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and
CAUTION!
Wheel – If Equipped
The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
function as the original equipment tire and wheel found your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original
equipment tire and wheel, refer to the recommended tire Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
rotation pattern in “Tire Rotation Recommendations” in The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip- compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo- the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo- 80D18 103M.
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use.
Do not install more than one non-matching temporary
use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
405
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. Do
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
the vehicle at any given time
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
5
406
STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
first opportunity.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
407
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
408
STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufollow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivaYou could lose control and have an collision resulting lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
in serious injury or death.
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little Information” placard for the size designation of your
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact tires. The service description and load identification will
be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING
409
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
5
410
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Due to limited clearance, use SAE class “S” low profile
cables or traction devices only. Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 #SZ 441 cables or equivalent are
recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
411
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
SNOW TIRES
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSome areas of the country require the use of snow tires
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
during the winter. All season tires satisfy this requirechecked before using these tire types.
ment and can be indicated by the M+S designation on the
tire sidewall.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only different loads and perform different steering, handling,
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
5
412
STARTING AND OPERATING
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotation
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
recommended cold tire pressure.
shown in the following diagram.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (–11°C). This means that when
STARTING AND OPERATING
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
413
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
5
414
STARTING AND OPERATING
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
(Continued)
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
415
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Moni• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
toring Telltale Light to illuminate, a warning message to
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
appear, or the chime to sound.
the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
Base System
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “TIRE LOW
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrutechnology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
ment cluster for 5 seconds, and an audible chime will be
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
activated, when one or more of the four active road tire
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as
readings to the Receiver Module.
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
check the tire pressure in all of your tires, and to maintain recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
the proper pressure.
5
416
STARTING AND OPERATING
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish, once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message may be displayed for approximately
5 seconds when a system fault is detected, and a chime
will sound. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur by any of the following:
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the
tire pressure. If you install the spare tire, in place of a
road tire, that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, a “TIRE LOW PRESSURE” message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds,
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING
on solid. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for 75 seconds. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for
75 seconds, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
417
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
5
418
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated, when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages
(Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for a
minimum of five seconds, and a graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
STARTING AND OPERATING
419
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
5
420
STARTING AND OPERATING
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is then followed by a
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by graphic display, with pressure values still shown. This
indicates the pressure values are still being received from
any of the following:
the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
correct vehicle position. However, the system still needs
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
to be serviced as long as the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
sensors.
message exists.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in
that affects radio wave signals.
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
housings.
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pres4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
sure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and
fault is detected possibly related to the trigger compooff for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
nent an incorrect sensor location fault. In this case, the
STARTING AND OPERATING
the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition
switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display
a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
421
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
422
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
5.7L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for
optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
423
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
5
424
STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold driveability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• change the engine oil and oil filter
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• disconnect and reconnect the battery
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E85 fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
425
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
(Continued) NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
426
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
(Continued)
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
STARTING AND OPERATING
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
427
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E85.
5
E85 Fuel Cap
E85 Badge
428
STARTING AND OPERATING
Ethanol Fuel (E85)
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
E85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
15% unleaded gasoline.
than 1/4 full
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with • When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
following start up even if the above recommendations
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
are followed.
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
429
Starting
The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
5
430
STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
STARTING AND OPERATING
431
5
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
cap.
Fuel Filler Cap
432
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
433
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel VEHICLE LOADING
filler door emergency release.
Certification Label
1. Open the liftgate.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
2. Remove the left rear storage bin cover.
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
3. Pull the release cable.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
5
434
STARTING AND OPERATING
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability, does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
Payload
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load capacity of this tire size.
weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry, including
Rim Size
the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
cargo.
listed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
435
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerInflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
Curb Weight
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
added.
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
the brakes operate.
5
436
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
hicles used for trailer towing.
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
437
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
438
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing
towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weightdistributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier trailer tongue weights (TW) and may be required
depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading
to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
requirements.
STARTING AND OPERATING
439
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
440
STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing
Hitch (Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) with the
optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized
dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
441
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
442
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Model
GCWR (Gross ComFrontal Area
Max. GTW
Max. Trailer Tongue
Model
bined Wt. Rating)
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Wt. (See Note)
3.6L
4x2
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
3.6L
4x4
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
5.7L
4x2
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
5.7L
4x4
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The addition of passengers
and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo
(to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs
(1 678 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
443
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels, or heavier in the
rear, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum
tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
444
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and
Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
445
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
(Continued)
5
446
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres− An electronically-actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
brake controller is not required.
inspection procedure.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg), and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
447
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package includes a seven–pin connector
at the rear of the vehicle and a four-pin harness located
under the rear bumper. The four-pin harness must be
(Continued) unclipped before use. Use a factory-approved trailer
harness and connector.
5
448
STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING
449
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if
you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range,
should be selected.
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level before towing
(5.7L engine).
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped) or − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
selecting a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range
you can get back to cruising speed.
Select (ERS) feature) while operating the vehicle under
heavy operating conditions, will improve performance
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shiftmaximize fuel efficiency.
ing and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
5
450
STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
SNOW PLOW
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
heating, take the following actions:
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
− City Driving
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectWhen stopped for short periods of time, shift the transedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING
451
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheel OFF the
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Front
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear
OK
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer
ALL
OK
OK
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be lowered to the “Park” (lowest) level, and have automatic
leveling disabled, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift™
– If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the “Park”
level (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to
follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or loss of proper tie-down tension.
5
452
STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towRecreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
will result.
7. Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is away from the battery post.
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Place the transmission in Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I姞
PARK.
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive
Models
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II姞
/Quadra–Drive姞 II Four-Wheel Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational
towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to
the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
453
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing.
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be placed in PARK for
recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to
be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
(Continued)
5
454
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
2. Turn OFF the ignition.
3. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, remove the
Keyless Enter-N-Go button and use the key fob to
complete this procedure. Refer to “Starting Procedures/
Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
455
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral)
button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds,
until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” mesNeutral Switch
sage will display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Infor- 8. Start the engine.
mation Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
Panel” for further information.
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition switch in
the unlocked OFF position.
5
456
STARTING AND OPERATING
12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and
the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N)
button or are no longer met during the four second
timer, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
16. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and secure it
away from the negative battery post.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met normal usage.
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
STARTING AND OPERATING
457
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will no longer
nected to the tow vehicle.
be displayed on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
4. Turn the key fob to the LOCK/OFF position (if it has
been moved or the engine has been started).
5. Turn the key fob to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
5
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
8. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral)
button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds,
until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(go out) when shift is complete. The “FOUR WHEEL
Neutral Switch
458
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE:
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid • Steps 1 through 7 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
gear clash.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
10. Release the brake pedal.
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
12. Start the engine.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
14. Release the parking brake.
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
16. The Keyless Enter-N-Go button (if equipped) may • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
now be reinstalled if desired. Refer to “Starting
Procedures/Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 472
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key FOB . . . . . 475
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
6
460
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
461
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
6
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
462
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Jack Storage Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
cargo area.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations for Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
463
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
7. For vehicle equipped with Quadra-Lift威 refer to
“Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information on disabling automatic
leveling.
6
464
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
465
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still
on the ground.
6
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack and Tool Assembly
466
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. For the front axle, place the jack and protective cap on 5. For the rear axle, place the jack and protective cap in
the body flange just behind the front tire Do not raise the the slot on the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
rear tire. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is fully engaged.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
467
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle
has been lowered.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
station.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray.
6
468
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
12. Securely store the road wheel and jack in the cargo
area.
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire, jack
and tool kit.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Stowed Spare
NOTE: The compact spare rests on a foam donut to raise
the wheel face off the storage area floor.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
469
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Preparations For Jump-Start
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
precautions.
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
470
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
471
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
the discharged battery.
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
6
472
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle.
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posiof the vehicle.
tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
you should have the battery and charging system indamage to the vehicle.
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
473
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully remove
the shift lever override access cover, located on the
bottom of the cupholder.
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold
the shift lock lever down.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
7. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the 8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and
install the rubber liner into the cupholder.
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
without starting the engine.
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the trans3. Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder (located
mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
next to the shifter on the center console).
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
6
474
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must be
lowered to the Park (lowest) level, and have automatic
leveling disabled, before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to the section on
Quadra-Lift™ for more information. If the vehicle cannot
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
be lowered to the Park level (for example, engine will not
run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause
fault codes to be set and/or loss of proper tie-down
tension.
2WD Models
4WD Models
If transmission is operable:
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Trans in NEUTRAL
• Trans in PARK
• 30 mph max(48 km/h)
• T/case in NEUTRAL
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
OK
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see Brake/
Transmission Interlock Manual Override (under Starting
and Operating, Automatic Transmission) for instructions
on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK
position for towing.
475
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position,
not in the LOCK position.
Towing Without the Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
6
476
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Two-Wheel Drive Models
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmisflatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
or towing dolly.
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF
the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is
in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
477
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
• Failure to follow these towing methods could
result in damage to the transmission and/or transfer case. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
䡵 Engine Compartment – 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System – OBD II . . . . . . . 483
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
7
480
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 525
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 517
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . 528
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 531
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
481
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
482
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM – OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
483
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
soon as possible.
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
7
484
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
485
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the REPLACEMENT PARTS
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
you may need to do nothing more than drive your warranty.
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
7
486
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
487
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart
(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE
range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
range.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
488
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
been certified by the American
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
manufacturer only recommends
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
API Certified engine oils.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
489
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).
Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number, should not be used.
ber, should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating Synthetic Engine Oils
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
quality requirements are met, and the recommended
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
7
490
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added to Engine Oils
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposDisposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, high-quality filters should be used to assure most effiindiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the cient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high-quality
environment. Contact your local authorized dealer, ser- oil filters and are recommended.
vice station, or governmental agency for advice on how
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
in your area.
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
491
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
7
492
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt condition should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
493
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
7
494
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt
or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
495
Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
7
496
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
blade holder.
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
497
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
498
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
499
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is imporvehicle.
tant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
against you.
Cooling System
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
WARNING!
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specificayou see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
tions, should be obtained immediately.
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
age:
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
7
500
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
maintenance intervals.
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
Selection Of Coolant
entire system for leaks.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolWith the engine at normal operating temperature (but
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genunot running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
information.
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than
the specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze),
may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in
an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
501
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5–Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
7
502
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F
(-37°C) are anticipated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
WARNING!
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
• The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals and children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
503
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap, unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
7
504
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporand distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
freezing.
mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be periodically inspected.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
505
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
506
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
507
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with
cast iron housings.
7
508
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then
and cause them to leak.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. RecomSelection of Lubricant
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
found, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
removing the filler plug located on the back side of the
transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge
of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level
position.
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
509
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
7
510
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine
Regular fluid level checks are not required. For this
reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or
malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the
transmission fluid level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
511
6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. The fluid level is only valid if there is a
solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. If the
fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Do
To check the fluid level properly, the following procedure
not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the
must be used:
oil fill tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
fluid level.
temperature.
Fluid Level Check – 5.7L Engine
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature. This occurs after at least 15 miles
(25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
pedal.
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
ending with the shift lever in PARK.
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
seated.
normal operating temperature.
7
512
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the The most common causes are:
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
• Stone and gravel impact.
dipstick tube.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
513
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and to • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept
finish.
clear and open.
7
514
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
considered the responsibility of the owner.
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or select a
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
MOPAR威 cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do
the owner.
not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well the wheels’ protective finish.
packaged and sealed.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider If Equipped
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
515
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild Leather Seat Care And Cleaning
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomstain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. mended for leather upholstery.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
protectants on Stain Repel products.
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
Interior Care
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
upholstery and carpeting.
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condiInterior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent,
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
7
516
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and therefore directly on the mirror.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
lowed by rinsing.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
rag.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
517
component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the
inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
7
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The totally integrated power module (TIPM) is located in
the engine compartment. This center contains cartridge
fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
518
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J01
J02
J03
J04
J05
J06
J07
J08
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Air Suspension
J09
Power Liftgate Module
J10
Trailer Tow
J11
Driver Door Node
J12
Passenger Door Node
J13
Antilock Brakes Pump/
Stability Control System
Antilock Brakes Valve/
Stability Control System
Power Seat
J14
J15
J17
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Blue
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
E-Brake
Headlamp Wash Relay
Contact
Drive Train Control
Module
Rear Defroster
Main Ignition Off Draw
(IOD)
Trailer Tow Lamps/Park
Lamps
Front Cabin Fan/Blower
Starter Motor Solenoid
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
Mini
Fuse
Description
Powertrain Control
Module/Powertrain
Control Module Transmission Range
Radiator Fan Motor HI/
Radiator Fan Motor
Low
Front Wiper
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
Description
M2
20 Amp
Yellow
M3
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Electronic Limit Slip
Differential/Air Suspension
Liftgate/Headrest
M5
M6
Front/Rear Washer Control
Sunroof Module
M8
Stop Lamps
M9
M7
Cartridge
Fuse
519
115V AC Power Inverter
Cigar Lighter
Power Outlet #2 (Switchable)
Front Heated Seat &
Steering Wheel
Rear Heated Seats
7
520
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
Video/Universal Garage
Door Opener
Heating, Ventilation &
Air Conditioning (Climate Control System)
Radio/Amplifier
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Instrument Cluster
Back Up Camera
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
Description
M15
20 Amp
Yellow
M16
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
Power Seat Module(s)/
Adaptive Cruise
Control/Audio
Telematics/Daytime
Running Lights Relay/
Air Suspension
Module/Instrument
Cluster
Occupant Restraint Controller
Automatic Shutdown 1
and 2
Instrument Cluster
M19
M20
M21
Cartridge
Fuse
Automatic Shutdown 3
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Horns (Low/High) –
Right
Horns (Low/High) –
Left
Rear Wiper
Fuel Pump Motor
Output/Diesel Lift
Pump (Export Only)
Driver Door Switch
Bank
Ignition Switch/Wireless
Control Module/Keyless
Entry Module
Powertrain Controller/
Transmission Controller
Cavity
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
521
Description
Tire Pressure Monitor
J1962 Diag Connector
Backup Lamps
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Powertrain Controller/
Transmission Controller
Park Assist Module/
Climate Control System
Module/Infra Red
Sensor/Compass
Module
7
522
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M35
M36
M37
M38
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Left Rear Parklamps
Power Outlet
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control System
Module
All Door Lock &Unlock
CAUTION!
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
523
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your Interior Lights
Bulb Type
battery. You may:
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
• Remove fuse #27 in the Totally Integrated Power Grab Handle Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . VT4976
Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
Rear Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Visor Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Underpanel Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Telltale/Hazard Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
524
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Aux Aperature Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W
Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T20
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Headlamps (Low Beam) – High Intensity
Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Headlamps (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Headlamps (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Liftgate Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
525
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front Turn Signal
Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector.
7
526
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze 4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of
front fog lamp housing.
the front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in 5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
the housing.
engaged in the slots of the collar.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
527
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
7
528
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Once lower trim is loose, close the liftgate.
4. Open the flipper glass.
5. Pull up glass seal at bottom of window opening.
6. Remove small trim panel around liftgate glass striker.
7. Close flipper glass and raise the liftgate.
8. Continue removing the trim.
9. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
10. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
11. Remove/replace bulb(s).
12. Reinstall the socket(s)
13. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
529
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear License Lamp
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
snap tab to remove the license lamp lens.
2. Pull bulb from socket.
3. Replace bulb.
4. Reinstall lens.
7
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
530
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5-Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
24 Gallons
91 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
10.4 Quarts
9.9 Liters
15.4 Quarts
14.6 Liters
16 Quarts
15.2 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
531
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.031 in [0.79 mm])
LZFR5C–11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
7
532
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent
licensed ATF+4威 product.
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 or equivalent.
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent
licensed ATF+4威 product.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (APIGL5) or equivalent with friction modifier additive.
Axle Differential (Rear) – 5.7L Engine With
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (APIElectronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
GL5) or equivalent.
Axle Differential (Rear) – 5.7L Engine Without MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 (APIElectronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
GL5) or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If
DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L Engine
MOPAR威 Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS-1165, such
as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L Engine
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic
Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 535
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
534
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be discomes first.
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
535 M
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
master cylinder, power steering and transmission
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in(5.7L only) and add as needed.
formation.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a At Each Oil Change
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
• Change the engine oil filter.
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Required Maintenance Intervals
damage.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
N
T 6 Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
537 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
N
T 30 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
539 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km).
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
N ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
C ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
E ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
541 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 542 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
543 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 544 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
N
T 78 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
545 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 546 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
A
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
E ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏
❏
❏
❏
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
547 M
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
548
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 551
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 552
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 552
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
9
550
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
551
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
552
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
553
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800485-2001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
554
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
555
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
556
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
557
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
558
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
560
INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 164
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 490
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,324
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,75
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74,79,95,244
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,72,74,75
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 68,72,75
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,252
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 21
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 324
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,509
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
INDEX
561
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510,511
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 219 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 92
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523,524
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,95 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Caps, Filler
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,426
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
10
562
INDEX
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,320
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,81,86,88
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,86
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,295
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 309
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
INDEX
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 503
. . . . . . . . . . . . 503
. . . . . . . . . . . . 500
. . . . . . . . . . . . 500
. . . . . . . . . . . . 504
. . . . . . . . . . . . 502
. . . . . . . . . . . . 502
. . . . . . . . . 500,530
. . . . . . . . . . . . 164
. . . . . . . . . . . . 224
. . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,322,329
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
563
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Used Engine Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 269
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 316
10
564
INDEX
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 484
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 219
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481,482
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 481,482
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,94,426
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . 161,164
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,530
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,254
Emergency, In Case of
Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487,530
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
INDEX
565
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,246,525,527
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,428
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fluid Level Checks
Filters
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 509,510,511
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488,530
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 76
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,94,426
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,497
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
10
566
INDEX
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 531
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,525
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,360
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430,433
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 430,433,483
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
INDEX
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,28,185,421
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,437
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,436
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™)
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
460 Ignition . . . . . . . . .
Key . . . . . . . . . . .
524
525 Ignition Key Removal
516 Illuminated Entry . .
...
...
..
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
567
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
145
525
110
320
344
246
387
246
384
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
441
224
206
142
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 16
14,16
. . 16
. . 22
10
568
INDEX
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,81
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,244
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461,464
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,273,340
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,273
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 84,86
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
INDEX
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,144
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,74,79,95,244
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 389
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,525
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524,525
569
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 244
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,204
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 244
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Tow/Haul Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
10
570
INDEX
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,144,525,527
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,86
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 491
. . . . . 486
. . . . . 534
. . 244,484
. . . . . 555
. . . . . 138
. . . . . 138
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485,554
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 376
INDEX
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,72,76
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,72,75
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
571
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488,530
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489,530
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483,484
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,460
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 6,555
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10
572
INDEX
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 396
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 219
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,122
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,375
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,215
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 159
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,355
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect™ studios)
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
403
320
316
156
507
202
117
224
INDEX
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 454
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 456
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 318
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
573
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,94
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
10
574
INDEX
Satellite Radio (Uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,95
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 54
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,88
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,122
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,252
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,295
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
INDEX
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,246,525,527
Sirius Backseat TV™ (Uconnect™ studios) . . . . . . 316
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,405,462
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 161,164
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,339
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,344
575
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,375
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,159
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,159
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,523
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,215
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10
576
INDEX
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 63 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,400,557
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Suspension, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,159
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 324
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 253
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396,397
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,159
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 396
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
INDEX
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,473
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
577
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,509
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 206
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 23
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,525,527
10
578
INDEX
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 309
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397,433
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,523
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,496
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,214,218
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,322
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Windshield Wiper Blades
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
INDEX
579
.
.
.
.
494
153
154
156
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
291680.ps 11JK72-126-AA Chrysler 1" gutter 05/14/2010 06:18:00
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
10WK741-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.